ac drives ultimate
TRANSCRIPT
AC DRIVES
STRAIGHT TALK ABOUT PWM AC DRIVE HARMONIC
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
Abstract
Though much has been written about harmonics and related issues with respect to ACdrives many drives users still seek clear answers to some basic questions The purpose ofthis paper is to provide some basic information regarding AC drives and harmonics witha simplified explanation of harmonics and power factor showing how both can affect adistribution system This paper will attempt to dispel some of the myths as well as pointout legitimate concerns provide some viable solutions and show their pros and cons
Drive Basics
Before we can have a meaningful discussion on harmonics with respect to AC drives first it is necessary to have a good understanding of the basic workings of a modernPWM AC drive specifically how it draws power from the utility line Figure 1 is aschematic diagram of a typical ldquovoltage sourcerdquo AC drive power structure
A modern AC drive power structure consists of three basic stages It is ironic that whilemost DC drives run on AC most AC drives run on DC This is because the invertersection shown in the ldquoIGBT Inverter Bridgerdquo in Figure 1 requires a stable DC source tooperate Therefore the first stage of the drive must convert threephase AC to DC The first stage is known as the converter section
AC DRIVES
Figure 1 ndash Typical AC Drive Power Structure
In an AC drive the converter stage consists of a three-phase full wave diode bridgethough SCRs (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers) are sometimes used in place of diodes If this stage were isolated from the rest of the power structure we would see a DCvoltage with a 360-Hertz ripple at the DC bus connection when threephase power isapplied to the input (see Figure 2)
A filter is required to smooth out the ripple on the DC bus in order to run the IGBTinverter Therefore a second or ldquofilterrdquo stage is required Primarily this consists of a largeldquoCapacitor Filterrdquo shown in Figure 1 Often an inductor or ldquoDC Link Chokerdquo shown inFigure 1 may be added The choke when used helps buffer the capacitor bank from theAC line and serves to reduce harmonics An explanation is discussed on the following pages
The third stage ldquoIGBT Inverter Bridgerdquo shown in Figure 1 is the inverter section Thissection uses high-speed transistors as switches to apply a ldquoPulse Width Modulatedrdquo(PWM) waveform to the motor Taking advantage of the fact that a motor is basically alarge inductor and that current does not change very fast in an inductor the DC busvoltage can be applied in pulses of varying width in order to achieve current in the motorthat approximates a sine wave
For the most part it is the rectifier and the filter that have an affect on the power lineLetrsquos use a single-phase model to show how the converter and filter work to change ACinto DC Shown in Figure 3a is a single-phase representation of a diode rectifier circuitwith a filter capacitor and load resistor across the DC bus
AC DRIVES
Figure 2 ndash Unfiltered Three-Phase Rectified Voltage
Upon application of AC power the capacitor will charge up to the peak of the appliedline voltage through the Diode Bridge Each diode works electrically the way a checkvalve works in a fluid It allows current to flow in one direction For the four diodes inthe single-phase bridge two are conducting at a time (one plus and one minus) while theother two are blocking When the polarity of the AC input changes the conducting andblocking diode pairs also change
When a load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor will begin to discharge With thepassing of the next input line cycle the capacitor only draws current through the diodesand from the line when the line voltage is greater than the DC bus voltage This is theonly time a given diode is forward biased This only occurs at or near the peak of theapplied sine wave resulting in a pulse of current that occurs every input cycle around the +- peak of the sine wave As load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor bankdischarges and the DC voltage level drops A lower DC voltage level means that the peak of the applied sine wave is higher than the capacitor voltage for a longer durationThus the width of the pulse of current is determined in part by the load on the DC busRefer to Figure 3b
Figure 3b shows input line voltage Vac Filtered DC bus voltage Vo and the pulsatingInput Current I Note that the unfiltered Vo trace would be before the filter capacitor isadded to the circuit
AC DRIVES
Figure 3a ndash Single-Phase Converter and Filter
The aforementioned characteristics hold true for the three-phase model with thedifference being 6 diodes and 6 pulses per cycle rather than two pulses per cycle as shownin the single-phase model For an AC drive the load is the Inverter section One can seeby looking at Figure 2 that if we have a three-phase diode bridge converter we get 6 ofthese voltage pulses for one complete three phase line cycle It is the pulsating input currentshown in Figure 4 that gives us the term ldquononlinear loadrdquo since the current does not flowin proportion to the applied voltage
In fact with a nonlinear load current may not flow at all for a major part of the appliedvoltage cycle In a three-phase system the widest conduction time possible would be 120degrees (roughly +- 60 degrees from the peak) Once we go outside this 120 degreesconduction window one of the other two phases will have a higher peak voltage andcurrent will flow from that phase
AC DRIVES
Figure 3b ndash Single-Phase Converter Measurements
Filtered
Unfiltered
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Abstract
Though much has been written about harmonics and related issues with respect to ACdrives many drives users still seek clear answers to some basic questions The purpose ofthis paper is to provide some basic information regarding AC drives and harmonics witha simplified explanation of harmonics and power factor showing how both can affect adistribution system This paper will attempt to dispel some of the myths as well as pointout legitimate concerns provide some viable solutions and show their pros and cons
Drive Basics
Before we can have a meaningful discussion on harmonics with respect to AC drives first it is necessary to have a good understanding of the basic workings of a modernPWM AC drive specifically how it draws power from the utility line Figure 1 is aschematic diagram of a typical ldquovoltage sourcerdquo AC drive power structure
A modern AC drive power structure consists of three basic stages It is ironic that whilemost DC drives run on AC most AC drives run on DC This is because the invertersection shown in the ldquoIGBT Inverter Bridgerdquo in Figure 1 requires a stable DC source tooperate Therefore the first stage of the drive must convert threephase AC to DC The first stage is known as the converter section
AC DRIVES
Figure 1 ndash Typical AC Drive Power Structure
In an AC drive the converter stage consists of a three-phase full wave diode bridgethough SCRs (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers) are sometimes used in place of diodes If this stage were isolated from the rest of the power structure we would see a DCvoltage with a 360-Hertz ripple at the DC bus connection when threephase power isapplied to the input (see Figure 2)
A filter is required to smooth out the ripple on the DC bus in order to run the IGBTinverter Therefore a second or ldquofilterrdquo stage is required Primarily this consists of a largeldquoCapacitor Filterrdquo shown in Figure 1 Often an inductor or ldquoDC Link Chokerdquo shown inFigure 1 may be added The choke when used helps buffer the capacitor bank from theAC line and serves to reduce harmonics An explanation is discussed on the following pages
The third stage ldquoIGBT Inverter Bridgerdquo shown in Figure 1 is the inverter section Thissection uses high-speed transistors as switches to apply a ldquoPulse Width Modulatedrdquo(PWM) waveform to the motor Taking advantage of the fact that a motor is basically alarge inductor and that current does not change very fast in an inductor the DC busvoltage can be applied in pulses of varying width in order to achieve current in the motorthat approximates a sine wave
For the most part it is the rectifier and the filter that have an affect on the power lineLetrsquos use a single-phase model to show how the converter and filter work to change ACinto DC Shown in Figure 3a is a single-phase representation of a diode rectifier circuitwith a filter capacitor and load resistor across the DC bus
AC DRIVES
Figure 2 ndash Unfiltered Three-Phase Rectified Voltage
Upon application of AC power the capacitor will charge up to the peak of the appliedline voltage through the Diode Bridge Each diode works electrically the way a checkvalve works in a fluid It allows current to flow in one direction For the four diodes inthe single-phase bridge two are conducting at a time (one plus and one minus) while theother two are blocking When the polarity of the AC input changes the conducting andblocking diode pairs also change
When a load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor will begin to discharge With thepassing of the next input line cycle the capacitor only draws current through the diodesand from the line when the line voltage is greater than the DC bus voltage This is theonly time a given diode is forward biased This only occurs at or near the peak of theapplied sine wave resulting in a pulse of current that occurs every input cycle around the +- peak of the sine wave As load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor bankdischarges and the DC voltage level drops A lower DC voltage level means that the peak of the applied sine wave is higher than the capacitor voltage for a longer durationThus the width of the pulse of current is determined in part by the load on the DC busRefer to Figure 3b
Figure 3b shows input line voltage Vac Filtered DC bus voltage Vo and the pulsatingInput Current I Note that the unfiltered Vo trace would be before the filter capacitor isadded to the circuit
AC DRIVES
Figure 3a ndash Single-Phase Converter and Filter
The aforementioned characteristics hold true for the three-phase model with thedifference being 6 diodes and 6 pulses per cycle rather than two pulses per cycle as shownin the single-phase model For an AC drive the load is the Inverter section One can seeby looking at Figure 2 that if we have a three-phase diode bridge converter we get 6 ofthese voltage pulses for one complete three phase line cycle It is the pulsating input currentshown in Figure 4 that gives us the term ldquononlinear loadrdquo since the current does not flowin proportion to the applied voltage
In fact with a nonlinear load current may not flow at all for a major part of the appliedvoltage cycle In a three-phase system the widest conduction time possible would be 120degrees (roughly +- 60 degrees from the peak) Once we go outside this 120 degreesconduction window one of the other two phases will have a higher peak voltage andcurrent will flow from that phase
AC DRIVES
Figure 3b ndash Single-Phase Converter Measurements
Filtered
Unfiltered
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
In an AC drive the converter stage consists of a three-phase full wave diode bridgethough SCRs (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers) are sometimes used in place of diodes If this stage were isolated from the rest of the power structure we would see a DCvoltage with a 360-Hertz ripple at the DC bus connection when threephase power isapplied to the input (see Figure 2)
A filter is required to smooth out the ripple on the DC bus in order to run the IGBTinverter Therefore a second or ldquofilterrdquo stage is required Primarily this consists of a largeldquoCapacitor Filterrdquo shown in Figure 1 Often an inductor or ldquoDC Link Chokerdquo shown inFigure 1 may be added The choke when used helps buffer the capacitor bank from theAC line and serves to reduce harmonics An explanation is discussed on the following pages
The third stage ldquoIGBT Inverter Bridgerdquo shown in Figure 1 is the inverter section Thissection uses high-speed transistors as switches to apply a ldquoPulse Width Modulatedrdquo(PWM) waveform to the motor Taking advantage of the fact that a motor is basically alarge inductor and that current does not change very fast in an inductor the DC busvoltage can be applied in pulses of varying width in order to achieve current in the motorthat approximates a sine wave
For the most part it is the rectifier and the filter that have an affect on the power lineLetrsquos use a single-phase model to show how the converter and filter work to change ACinto DC Shown in Figure 3a is a single-phase representation of a diode rectifier circuitwith a filter capacitor and load resistor across the DC bus
AC DRIVES
Figure 2 ndash Unfiltered Three-Phase Rectified Voltage
Upon application of AC power the capacitor will charge up to the peak of the appliedline voltage through the Diode Bridge Each diode works electrically the way a checkvalve works in a fluid It allows current to flow in one direction For the four diodes inthe single-phase bridge two are conducting at a time (one plus and one minus) while theother two are blocking When the polarity of the AC input changes the conducting andblocking diode pairs also change
When a load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor will begin to discharge With thepassing of the next input line cycle the capacitor only draws current through the diodesand from the line when the line voltage is greater than the DC bus voltage This is theonly time a given diode is forward biased This only occurs at or near the peak of theapplied sine wave resulting in a pulse of current that occurs every input cycle around the +- peak of the sine wave As load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor bankdischarges and the DC voltage level drops A lower DC voltage level means that the peak of the applied sine wave is higher than the capacitor voltage for a longer durationThus the width of the pulse of current is determined in part by the load on the DC busRefer to Figure 3b
Figure 3b shows input line voltage Vac Filtered DC bus voltage Vo and the pulsatingInput Current I Note that the unfiltered Vo trace would be before the filter capacitor isadded to the circuit
AC DRIVES
Figure 3a ndash Single-Phase Converter and Filter
The aforementioned characteristics hold true for the three-phase model with thedifference being 6 diodes and 6 pulses per cycle rather than two pulses per cycle as shownin the single-phase model For an AC drive the load is the Inverter section One can seeby looking at Figure 2 that if we have a three-phase diode bridge converter we get 6 ofthese voltage pulses for one complete three phase line cycle It is the pulsating input currentshown in Figure 4 that gives us the term ldquononlinear loadrdquo since the current does not flowin proportion to the applied voltage
In fact with a nonlinear load current may not flow at all for a major part of the appliedvoltage cycle In a three-phase system the widest conduction time possible would be 120degrees (roughly +- 60 degrees from the peak) Once we go outside this 120 degreesconduction window one of the other two phases will have a higher peak voltage andcurrent will flow from that phase
AC DRIVES
Figure 3b ndash Single-Phase Converter Measurements
Filtered
Unfiltered
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Upon application of AC power the capacitor will charge up to the peak of the appliedline voltage through the Diode Bridge Each diode works electrically the way a checkvalve works in a fluid It allows current to flow in one direction For the four diodes inthe single-phase bridge two are conducting at a time (one plus and one minus) while theother two are blocking When the polarity of the AC input changes the conducting andblocking diode pairs also change
When a load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor will begin to discharge With thepassing of the next input line cycle the capacitor only draws current through the diodesand from the line when the line voltage is greater than the DC bus voltage This is theonly time a given diode is forward biased This only occurs at or near the peak of theapplied sine wave resulting in a pulse of current that occurs every input cycle around the +- peak of the sine wave As load is applied to the DC bus the capacitor bankdischarges and the DC voltage level drops A lower DC voltage level means that the peak of the applied sine wave is higher than the capacitor voltage for a longer durationThus the width of the pulse of current is determined in part by the load on the DC busRefer to Figure 3b
Figure 3b shows input line voltage Vac Filtered DC bus voltage Vo and the pulsatingInput Current I Note that the unfiltered Vo trace would be before the filter capacitor isadded to the circuit
AC DRIVES
Figure 3a ndash Single-Phase Converter and Filter
The aforementioned characteristics hold true for the three-phase model with thedifference being 6 diodes and 6 pulses per cycle rather than two pulses per cycle as shownin the single-phase model For an AC drive the load is the Inverter section One can seeby looking at Figure 2 that if we have a three-phase diode bridge converter we get 6 ofthese voltage pulses for one complete three phase line cycle It is the pulsating input currentshown in Figure 4 that gives us the term ldquononlinear loadrdquo since the current does not flowin proportion to the applied voltage
In fact with a nonlinear load current may not flow at all for a major part of the appliedvoltage cycle In a three-phase system the widest conduction time possible would be 120degrees (roughly +- 60 degrees from the peak) Once we go outside this 120 degreesconduction window one of the other two phases will have a higher peak voltage andcurrent will flow from that phase
AC DRIVES
Figure 3b ndash Single-Phase Converter Measurements
Filtered
Unfiltered
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
The aforementioned characteristics hold true for the three-phase model with thedifference being 6 diodes and 6 pulses per cycle rather than two pulses per cycle as shownin the single-phase model For an AC drive the load is the Inverter section One can seeby looking at Figure 2 that if we have a three-phase diode bridge converter we get 6 ofthese voltage pulses for one complete three phase line cycle It is the pulsating input currentshown in Figure 4 that gives us the term ldquononlinear loadrdquo since the current does not flowin proportion to the applied voltage
In fact with a nonlinear load current may not flow at all for a major part of the appliedvoltage cycle In a three-phase system the widest conduction time possible would be 120degrees (roughly +- 60 degrees from the peak) Once we go outside this 120 degreesconduction window one of the other two phases will have a higher peak voltage andcurrent will flow from that phase
AC DRIVES
Figure 3b ndash Single-Phase Converter Measurements
Filtered
Unfiltered
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Harmonics Explained
Now that we understand how current is drawn from the AC line by a drive letrsquos try todefine the term ldquoharmonicsrdquo Looking at the waveform in Figure 5 we can see that eachwaveform is close to a perfect sine wave and the current is proportional to voltage (although the current is lagging the voltage) This is a linear load and contains noharmonics A perfect sine wave by definition has no harmonics but rather onefundamental component at one frequency The waveforms in Figure 5 are sine waves atone frequency 60 Hertz We saw that nonlinear loads such as AC to DC rectifiersproduce distorted waveforms Harmonics are present in waveforms that are not perfectsine waves due to distortion from nonlinear loads Around the 1830rsquos a Frenchmathematician named Fourier discovered that a distorted waveform can be representedas a series of sine waves each an integer number multiple of the fundamental frequencyand each with a specific magnitude For example the 5th harmonic on a system with a
AC DRIVES
Figure 4 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a three-phaseAC drive
Figure 5 ndash 60 Hertz Input Line to Neutral Voltage(VAN) and Input Current (IA) on Phase A of a linear load
VAN
IA
VAN
IA
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
60 Hertz fundamental waveform would have a frequency of 5 times 60 Hertz or 300Hertz These higher order waveforms are called ldquoharmonicsrdquo The collective sum of thefundamental and each harmonic is called a Fourier series This series can be viewed as aspectrum analysis where the fundamental frequency and each harmonic component aredisplayed graphically in a bar chart format as shown in Figure 6
To arrive at a total current each component is added as a 90-degree vector That is to saythe total current is the square root of the sum of the square of each component
Leaving the mathematical representations aside we can say something about the harmoniccontent by simply looking at the wave shape The more it looks like a sine wave the lowerthe harmonic content If a waveform is a perfect square wave it will contain all of the oddnumber harmonics out to infinity Even number harmonics can be detected by a lack ofsymmetry about the X-axis If the top and bottom half of the waveform do not look likemirror images of each other even harmonics are present Typically a drive will not causeeven harmonics The sources of most even harmonics are arc furnaces some florescentlights welders and any device that draws current in a seemingly random pattern Anothernoteworthy fact is that balanced three-phase rectifier type loads (such as an AC drive) donot produce a third harmonic component Nor do they produce any harmoniccomponent with 3 as a multiple (3rd 9th 15th 21st etc) These are known as triplenharmonics and are not present in most AC drives If we look close at figure 6 we can seeno even harmonics or triplens The 11th harmonic and higher is a point where themagnitude diminishes to a very low level What we are left with is the 5th and 7th orderThese are the ldquoproblem childrdquo harmonics for AC drives If we can reduce these twoharmonic components we will have gone a long way in meeting any harmonicspecification for AC drives
AC DRIVES
Figure 6 ndash Harmonic Spectrum Analysis
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
As we can see from the six-pulse waveform in Figure 7 we do not have a sine wave or asquare wave It can be said that the input current contains some harmonics
Harmonic Problems
Now that we know harmonic currents flow in an AC drive with a 6-pulse front end letrsquosaddress what if any problems this may cause Although noise coupling into phone linesand other equipment is often sited the main issue is the added cost of the powerdistribution infrastructure Power is only transferred through a distribution line whencurrent is in phase with voltage This is the very reason for concerns about input ldquopowerfactorrdquo Displacement power factor in a motor running across the line can be explained asthe cosine of the phase angle between the current and voltage as shown in Figure 5 Sincea motor is an inductive load current lags voltage by about 30 to 40 degrees when loadedmaking the power factor about 075 to 08 as opposed to about 095 for many PWM ACdrives In the case of a resistive load the power factor would be 1 or ldquounityrdquo In such a caseall of the current flowing results in power being transferred Poor power factor (less than1 or ldquounityrdquo) means reactive current that does not contribute power is flowing
AC DRIVES
Figure 7 ndash Typical input current for an AC drive under load
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Either harmonic or reactive current flowing through a system does not produce powerThe power infrastructure has to carry these currents causing heat loss due to increasedI2R drop in the wire and higher flux in transformer iron Transformers and distributionlines in some cases may need to be upsized to handle the burden of this additional non-power producing current
Harmonic current distortion can also introduce voltage distortion Since a typical 6-pulse nonlinear load draws current only near the peak of the sine wave I2R voltage dropor loading effect on transformers and power lines only occurs at the peak A combinationof high source impedance and harmonic currents can cause a ldquoflat toppingrdquo effect on theline voltage A source with high impedance is known as a ldquosoftrdquo source because voltage iseasily distorted while a source with low impedance is known as a ldquostiff rdquo source Figure 8is a ldquosoftrdquo source (such as a generator) with voltage flat topping The distorted linevoltage might then introduce harmonic currents in other linear loads such as motorsHarmonic current in a motor does not contribute to torque at the shaft but does addheat and can raise the operating temperature of a motor
AC DRIVES
Figure 8 ndash Voltage (VAN) flat topping on a ldquosoftrdquo source
VAN
IA
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
While all of these potential issues are real the reality isthey are normally not as serious as some would like us tobelieve The IEEE-519 document has set limits on thelevel of ldquoallowable harmonicsrdquo and specified these limits atldquothe point of common couplingrdquo or PCC The PCC isthe point where the customer meets the utility and isusually the point between the utility transformer and thecustomerrsquos facility transformer as seen in figure 9 IEEE-519 defines limits at the PCC because the PowerCompany pays for the infrastructure up to the PCC Theuser bares the cost of the distribution system within theirown facility and any over sizing that may be required
Harmonic distortion measurements are normally given inldquototal harmonic distortionrdquo or THD THD defines theharmonic distortion in terms of the fundamental currentdrawn by a load
Where Mh is the magnitude of either the voltage or current harmonic component andMfundamental is the magnitude of either the fundamental voltage or current It is importantto note that THD uses the instantaneous fundamental current as the denominatorTherefore if a consumerrsquos plant is running at a small percentage of their peak loading theTHD calculated may be very high However the current distortion relative to the utilitysupply may actually be less than when they are running at peak load
Thus IEEE-519 uses a term called TDD (Total Demand Distortion) to express currentdistortion in terms of the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws
AC DRIVES
Figure 9 ndash Example of the PCC
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Iload is the maximum fundamental current that the consumer draws and it could bemeasured over a specified time period or estimated Keep in mind that TDD is only used to measure current distortion not voltage distortion Because TDD uses themaximum fundamental current consumed as the denominator TDD will most likely be less than THD
The limits IEEE-519 places on current distortion also depend on the ratio of IscIloadwhere Isc is the short circuit current Isc for a supply transformer can usually be obtainedfrom the utility Isc can also be calculated knowing the supply transformer impedanceusing the following formula
The ratio of IscIload determines the ldquostiffnessrdquo of the supply Therefore the ldquostifferrdquo thesupply the higher the ratio IscIload will be and the more current TDD allowed
In most cases it is much easier to meet IEEE-519 limits at the utility interface than tryingto meet it at every point in the facility This is especially true where many sources ofharmonics exist within a facility Unlike point source water pollution in a stream or riversystem when all of the point sources of current harmonics in a given facility are addedup many of them cancel each other out Natural phase shifting and variations in sourceimpedence produce different distortion characteristics even on two or more identicalnonlinear loads being loaded to the same level For example we would most likely seethree distinct harmonic spectrum patterns from each identical 100 horsepower drivewhere the input current to the three drives in the same facility were running at equalpower levels Each could have a current THD level of 20 Looking up stream before the three branch circuits for each drive we would see a total current for each drive aboutequal to the three drivesrsquo RMS currents added together However the THD in current atthe same point upstream might only be 7 Be cautious of establishing the ldquopoint ofcommon couplingrdquo at any point other than the utility interface Doing so may lead to thepurchase of unnecessary equipment
Furthermore the displacement power factor that one might see with a drive might be095 as opposed to 075 power factor for the same motor across the line This frees upampacity in the system Some of this may be used up by the increase in harmonics but inmost cases the overall effect is a net benefit by using a drive Generally sizing thetransformer and power feed lines as if the motor were running across the line is morethan adequate to handle any harmonic currents from an AC drive
AC DRIVES
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Solutions
One of the simplest solutions in reducing harmonics is to add a reactor at the line inputside or in the DC link This reactor or inductor will not allow current to change fast Itforces the capacitor bank to charge at a slower rate drawing current over a longer periodof time The addition of this component can reduce typical distortion levels from morethan 80 to less than 20 THD depending on source impedance Figure 10 shows anAC drive without a DC link reactor or line reactor and Figures 4 and 7 shows an ACdrive with DC link reactors Most drive manufacturers include these reactors in largerdrives Making sure all large drives (10 horsepower and above) have a reactor can go along way toward reducing harmonics in a given facility
In most cases beyond the addition of a reactor harmonic mitigation techniques are notneeded If they are many options exist including 12 or 18 pulse converters passive filtersactive filters and active front ends
The 12 and 18 pulse solutions rely on two or three separate three-phase systems eachfeeding a diode or SCR bridge The DC output is then combined to feed the capacitorin the DC bus Each of the three-phase input sections is phase shifted from the other by60 degreesn where n is the number of three-phase feeds Thus an 18-pulse systemrequiring three separate three-phase feeds would have a phase shift of (60 degrees3) 20 degrees This type of system is effective if all of the three-phase feeders have balancedvoltage It also requires one rectifier section for each three-phase feed and a specialtransformer to produce the multiple secondary phase shifted outputs
AC DRIVES
Figure 10 ndash Input Line to Neutral Voltage (VAN) and Input Current (IA) on phase A of a three-phase ACdrive without a DC Link Choke or line reactor
VAN
IA
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Figure 11a shows a typical 12-pulse front-end configurationNotice the transformer has two 30-degree phase shiftedsecondary outputs As shown in Figure 7 each secondarywindings feeding its diode bridge and each has the typical 6-pulse waveform The primary current in the 12-pulsetransformer looks a bit different The 12-pulse primarycurrent shown in Figure 11b is the algebraic sum of the twosecondary outputs Since a 30-degree phase shift exists thepeaks do not line up The result is an input current that looksa bit more sinusoidal and therefore has a lower harmoniccontent Figure 11c shows the 18-pulse solution Notice theimprovement in the current shape over the 12-pulse input
A passive filter as seen in Figure12 offers some help inreducing harmonics by allowing current to flow primarily atthe fundamental They use energy storage devices such as
inductors and capacitors to draw current from the line at low frequency (60 hertz) and deliver it to the drive in the required bursts or pulses (harmonics)
AC DRIVES
Figure 11a ndash 12-Pulse converter (parallel output type)
Figure 11b ndash Primary current for a 12-Pulse system Figure 11c ndash Primary current for an 18-Pulse system
Figure 12 ndash Passive Filter on AC drive
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Active filters can be very effective but are also somewhat expensive They work by usingan active switch arrangement that looks very much like the inverter side of a drive Usingcurrent sensors this device adds the sine wave complement of the current it measures tothe line making the current up stream from the drive look sinusoidal
An active front end as shown in Figure 13 allows anAC drive to take current from the line in what is veryclose to a pure sine wave Therefore THD is very|low The active front end also has other importantbenefits It is bi-directional and can be used to feedmultiple drives In other words this means that it candraw current from the line and deliver current to theline should the drive or drives need to handleregenerative energy from an overhauling ordecelerating motor
Figure 14a shows input line to neutralvoltage and input current for an activefront end converter in the motoringcondition Notice current and voltage arein phase and both current and voltagewave shapes look relatively sinusoidalThe result is excellent power factor withlow harmonic content Figure 14b showsthe same waveforms with the drive in aregenerative condition The only differenceis that current and voltage are 180 degreesphase shifted This means that the powerfactor is ndash1 rather than 1 It is still unitypower factor with the minus sign indicatingcurrent in flowing back to the line sincethe system is regenerating
AC DRIVES
Figure 13 ndash Active Front End Converter
IA
VAN
Figure 14a ndash Active front end motoring
Figure 14b ndash Active front end regenerating
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Conclusion
While it is true that in some cases AC drives can cause harmonic related problems it isimportant to recognize these instances are not the norm Often what drives add to thesystem in harmonics they make up for with improved input power factor actually freeingup KVA in the power distribution system This is especially true when a link choke isincluded in the drive Remember IEEE-519 needs only to be satisfied at the Point OfCommon Coupling and not within a given facility This will help to eliminate thepurchase of unnecessary equipment When reducing harmonics passive filters and multi-pulsed solutions are among the lowest cost Active filters cost a bit more and do a betterjob An active front end may be the most expensive in terms of up front cost Long termthough money saved by not requiring dynamic braking equipment and energy savingsin regeneration of power may make this the most economical solution if regeneration orldquobrakingrdquo are required
AC DRIVES
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Publication DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P ndash October 2006 Copyright copy2006 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Authors
John T Streicher Sr Drives Applications SpecialistJosh J Olive Drives Applications Specialist
Acknowledgements
Thanks to Nick Guskov and Howard Murphy for assistance with the graphics and othercontent of this paper
References
IEEE Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power SystemsIEEE Std 519-1992
Roger C Dugan Mark F MaGranaghan H Wayne Beaty Electrical PowerSystems Quality McGraw-Hill Inc 1996
Intro
Generic pub print specs
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
| Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
| Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
| This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
| Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
| Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
| IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
| UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
| AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
| BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
| Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
| Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
| For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Generic pub print specs
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
| Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EA | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |
| dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRIVES-WP011C-EN-P | Harmonic Problems and Solutions | PK | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 10012006 | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 4 | 16 | 4 | Plain | 24 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information | finished size when folded should be 85wide by 11 long (flat is 11 x 17) | NA |
Field definitions
| PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
| EA = Each | ||||
| PK = Pack | ||||
| PD = Pad | ||||
| RL = Roll | ||||
| BK = Book | ||||
| CT = Carton | ||||
| BX = Box | ||||
| ST = Set | ||||
| Multiple Order Qty | ||||
| Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
| Business Group | ||||
| The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
| CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
| Finance | ||||
| Human Resources | ||||
| IT | ||||
| Logistics | ||||
| Manufacturing | ||||
| Marketing Commercial | ||||
| Marketing Europe | ||||
| Marketing Other | ||||
| Operations | ||||
| Order Services | ||||
| Other | ||||
| Process Improvement | ||||
| Procurement | ||||
| Quality | ||||
| Sales | ||||
| Max Order Quantity | ||||
| Presale items = 100 | ||||
| Postsale items = 5 | ||||
| NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
| Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
| Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
| Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
| BindingStitching | ||||
| For a Form (F) use | ||||
| CARBONLESS | ||||
| CUTSHEET | ||||
| ENVELOPE | ||||
| For a Book (B) use | ||||
| LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
| PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
| PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
| SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
| STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
| STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
| STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
| THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
| THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
| Sides Printed | ||||
| Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
| Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
| Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
| Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
| Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
| Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
| Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
| Paper Stock Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| PLAIN | Bond | |||
| ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
| BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
| BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
| C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
| C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
| C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
| C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
| CARD | Card Stock | |||
| CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
| CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
| COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
| CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
| CUSTOM | Custom | |||
| CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
| ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
| ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
| ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
| GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
| GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
| HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
| INDEX | Index | |||
| LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
| MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
| OFFSET | Offset | |||
| PART2 | 2 Part | |||
| PART3 | 3 Part | |||
| PART4 | 4 Part | |||
| PART5 | 5 Part | |||
| PART6 | 6 Part | |||
| PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
| PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
| PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
| PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
| RECYL | Recycled | |||
| SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
| SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
| SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
| TAG | Tag | |||
| TEXT | Text | |||
| TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
| TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
| TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
| TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
| VELLUM | Vellum | |||
| VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
| WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
| WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
| WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
| Paper Stock Color | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Blue | ||||
| Buff | ||||
| Canary | ||||
| Cherry | ||||
| Clear | ||||
| Cream | ||||
| Custom | ||||
| Goldrenrod | ||||
| Gray | ||||
| Green | ||||
| Ivory | ||||
| Lavender | ||||
| Manilla | ||||
| NCRPinkCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
| NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
| NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
| NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
| NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
| NCRWhitePink | ||||
| NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
| Opaque | ||||
| Orange | ||||
| Orchid | ||||
| Peach | ||||
| Pink | ||||
| Purple | ||||
| Salmon | ||||
| Tan | ||||
| Violet | ||||
| White | ||||
| Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
| 11 x 17 | ||||
| 18 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 24 x 36 Poster | ||||
| 3 x 5 | ||||
| 36 x 24 Poster | ||||
| 4 x 6 | ||||
| 475 x 7 | ||||
| 475 x 775 | ||||
| 55 x 85 | ||||
| 6 x 4 | ||||
| 7 x 9 | ||||
| 7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
| 85 x 11 | ||||
| 825 x 10875 | ||||
| 825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
| 8375 x 10875 | ||||
| 9 x 12 | ||||
| A4 | ||||
| A5 | ||||
| Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
| Drilling Locations | ||||
| 1CENTER | ||||
| 1LEFTTOP | ||||
| 1TOPCENTER | ||||
| 2LEFT | ||||
| 2LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP | ||||
| 2TOP2LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP3LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
| 3BOTTOM | ||||
| 3LEFT | ||||
| 3LEFT2TOP | ||||
| 3LEFT3TOP | ||||
| 3RIGHT | ||||
| 3TOP | ||||
| 3TOP5LEFT | ||||
| 5BOTTOOM | ||||
| 5CENTER | ||||
| 5LEFT | ||||
| 5RIGHT | ||||
| 5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
| 5TOP | ||||
| Fold Type | ||||
| Description | ||||
| HALF | Half | |||
| C | C Fold | |||
| DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
| OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
| SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
| SHORT | Short Fold | |||
| V | V Fold | |||
| Z | Z Fold | |||
| Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
| Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
| 77 or more pages | NA | |||
| 33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
| 3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
| 1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
| Comments | ||||
| CoverText Stock | ||||
| 100 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 100 Gloss Text | ||||
| 100 Text | ||||
| 10pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Cover | ||||
| 10pt C2S Text | ||||
| 10pt Text Stock | ||||
| 110 White Index | ||||
| 12pt C1S Cover | ||||
| 20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
| 50 Colored Offset | ||||
| 50 White Offset | ||||
| 50 White Opaque | ||||
| 60 Cover Stock | ||||
| 60 White Offset | ||||
| 80 Gloss Cover | ||||
| 80 Gloss Text | ||||
| 8pt C1S White | ||||
| 90 White Index | ||||
| CoverText Ink | ||||
| Black | ||||
| Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color | ||||
| 4 color over black | ||||
| 4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
| 4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
| 4 color + aqueous | ||||
| 4 color + varnish |